Dodge Durango 2012 Owner`s manual

2012 Durango
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12WD01-126-AA
907706 Durango_OM cover.indd 1
First Edition
Durango
Printed in U.S.A.
3/10/11 2:26 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle.
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
read these publications carefully. Following the instrucManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmisassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
injury. Drive carefully.
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 䡵 Liftgate
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 53
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 57
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 57
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 58
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 61
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 66
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 69
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 73
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the ElecOperating” for further information.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
then pull the key out with your other hand.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, place the shift
lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right slightly, then
remove the Key Fob as described. If a malfunction
Emergency Key Removal
occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition
switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperNOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
able. The engine can be started and stopped, but the
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature, opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed in
ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will Replacement Keys
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec- vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• With Keyless Enter-N-Go, always remember to
place the ignition in OFF.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorNOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer ized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to switches for door locks, power liftgate and flipper glass
are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both
the authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
audio and visual signals, the horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will
flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is
still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make
sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
one should go off in the future, you will need to know key is physically removed from the ignition.
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
Rearming The System
vehicle:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will • Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
rearm itself.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informaposition.
tion).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infornot disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
mation).
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors or open any door.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furremain armed when the battery is reconnected; the ther information.
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
RKE transmitters.
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fob With Five-Button RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your InRefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
strument Panel” for further information.
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Approach
Remote Unlock Sequence
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Program(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Feamable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Panel” for further information.
further information.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights turn on, the park lamps will flash, the horn
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know
will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
(24 km/h) or greater.
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
strument Panel” for further information.
and horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
2
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device must accept any interference received,
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
including interference that may cause undesired
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveoperation.
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apapproximately
300 ft (91 m).
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
All of the following conditions must be met before the
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
engine will remote start:
• Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go vehicle
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
WARNING!
• Hood closed
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
on the RKE transmitter twice within five secvehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premaonds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
turely:
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterNOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn to Run” will display in the EVIC
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
the START button.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features
(SETUP)”
in
“Understanding
Your
InstrumentPanel”.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
2
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
doors will not lock.
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled.
Doors
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
approximately 72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
Entry feature.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower relock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
sponse time.
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• Unlocking the vehicle by RKE transmitter or Keyless
Enter-N-Go and not opening any door will cause the
doors to ⬙re-lock⬙ and arm theft alarm (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Enter The Liftgate
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
below the liftgate glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you
press the button on the liftgate. For further information,
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
the outside of the handles.
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY position.
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
and release it when you want the window to stop.
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condiThe power window switches remain active for 10 min- tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
utes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
either front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button again.
Window Lockout Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
2
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate. The power liftgate may also be opened and
closed with the overhead console switch.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
“Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
Electronic Vehicle information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
Also, the power liftgate may be closed by pressing the open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
liftgate switch located on the left rear trim, near the be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate opening. Pressing once will close the liftgate only. liftgate trim panel.
This button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate power
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
liftgate into manual mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the
liftgate, and then press it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
NOTE:
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
manual operation.
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
meets sufficient resistance.
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
below ⫺22°F (⫺30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
rear liftgate close button or overhead console close
liftgate switches.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
detection of an obstruction.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
WARNING!
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains Please pay close attention to the information in this
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
window
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
CHildren (LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
energy during an impact event
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• All seat belt systems (except the driver) include Autorates of inflation based on the severity and type of
matic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat
collision.
belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
WARNING!
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger You should read the instructions provided with your
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
tion.
shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- Front Air Bags room to inflate.
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate to Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in an accident. The belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
shoulder belt.
2
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
WARNING!
worn snugly and positioned properly.
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines certain types of rear impacts.
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front
Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
AHR In Reset Position
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
NOTE:
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuchecked by a qualified specialist at an authorized pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
dealer.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
notification.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is an accident.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
tivating BeltAlert威.
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
tender and store it.
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 2 — Knee Bolster
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seatdesign. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
the outboard side of the front seats.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat position.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Air Bag System Components
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag system components:
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their • Air Bag Warning Light
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Steering Wheel and Column
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
(SABIC)
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
used for more severe collisions.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downCurtain (SABIC) Location
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
(Continued) Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
frontal collisions, including some that may produce subThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collirequired for this vehicle.
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air severe initial deceleration.
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
the severity and type of impact.
type of collision.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acciORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onequarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
to certain impact events.
immediately after deployment.
Enhanced Accident Response System
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the communication network remains intact, and the
the air bag system.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- or all of the following may occur:
ing functions:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
until the ignition key is turned off.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
removed.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipwere buckled/fastened;
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
vehicle or the EDR.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
Child Restraints
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
These data can help provide a better understanding of time, including babies and children. Every state in the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of seats rather than in the front.
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
crash investigation.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child.
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardcan become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardmatter how strong you are. The child and others facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
size.
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
air bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The second row seating positions are equipped with
automatic locking retractors (ALR). To install child
restraint seats pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough allowance to pass it through the child
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the shoulder belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. For additional
information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
Mode⬙ earlier in the Occupant Restraints Section of the
owners’ manual.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
WARNING!
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
All children whose weight or height is above the • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
slouching can move the belt out of position.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
the back.
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
structure.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
webbing-mounted lower attachments and child seats
with fixed lower attachments. The rear seat lower anchors can be are just visible when you lean into the rear
seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them
if you run your finger along the intersection of the
seatback and seat cushion surfaces. The vehicle’s seat belt
must be used for the center position. Regardless of the
specific type of lower attachment, never install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a comNOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
mon lower anchorage.
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
with, and never leave your child unattended in the position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
vehicle.
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
The rear outboard seating positions have lower
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instrucanchorages capable of accommodating
tions, refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child
LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
Restraint System”.
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
2
Latch Anchorages
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, there are top tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
WARNING!
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
First, loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. There are three top tether
anchorages located on the back of the seat, behind the
gap panel. They are not visible until you fold the gap
panel down. Do not use the cargo tie down hooks
located on the floor behind the seat. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if
you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then
allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional
information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
description under “Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
cinching latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
ALR
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
In the rear center seat, you may have trouble tightening
the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens
the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still can’t make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
the upward position. To access the center seat arm rest
tether first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat
backing.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat For center seating position route the tether strap over the
backing, then raise the armrest and attach the tether hook seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard
seating positions, route the tether under the head restraints, and attach the hook to the top tether anchor
located on the back of the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted
floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the
top tether strap anchorages.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• Do not use the cargo tie downs located on the load
floor. Improper usage of the tether can lead to a
failure of an infant or child restraint. The child
could be badly injured or killed.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
Top Tether Strap Attachment
For the center seating position route the tether strap over
the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the top
tether anchorage located on the back of the seat behind
the gap panel. For the outboard seating positions, route
the tether strap under the headrests and attach the hook
to the top tether anchorage located on the back of the seat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
behind the gap panel. Please note the top tether anchorages are not visible until you fold the gap panel down.
Do not use the cargo tie down hooks located on the
floor behind the seats.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). in the engine or damage may result.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comareas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
out of the area.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
Vehicle
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
Seat Belts
use the recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 107
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . 112
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped . . . . . . . 112
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . 158
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Folding Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 185
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 183
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 183
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 202
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 195
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
䡵 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
. . . . . . 198
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 207
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 209
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 221
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 226
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 216
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Retractable Cargo Area
Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
the visors.
increased coverage.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
automatically.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumThe BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
3
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including radio muting.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
the appropriate visual alert only.
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
the radio is muted.
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is reWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approstatus is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
chime.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle websites:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
used.
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • www.jeep.com/uconnect
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al- • or call 1–877–855–8400
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute microphone for private conversation.
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect™ Phone
button) that will enable you to
mand
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi- • For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
can also break the commands into parts and say each
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
certain radios.
example, you can use the compound form voice
Operation
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
the compound form command into two voice comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remenu structure. Voice commands are required after most
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
specific command and then guided through the available
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
options.
Voice Command Tree
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another prompt.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
• Press the
button to begin.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
and follow the audible prompts.
few instances the system will take you back to the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiprevious menu.
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
after the initial pairing process.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being • The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
of certain radios.
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
Call By Saying A Name
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
button to begin.
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile • Press the
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Call”.
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call.
“Phonebook New Entry”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomyou can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previmended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
instead of “Bob”.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
book entry, if desired.
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
may appear in the display of certain radios.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
After you are finished adding an entry into the phoneNOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downsupported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatiloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downTransfer From Mobile Phone
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availnames) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
able for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone“Call by Saying a Name” section.
book.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phonebook entry that you are editing.
phone connection.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
• Press the
button to begin.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
entry that you wish to edit.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• Press the
button to begin.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
button to begin.
• Press the
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
button while the
from the list, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
“Delete”.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
deleted.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
wish to delete.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
Phone Call Features
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
button to begin.
• Press the
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
“Phonebook List Names”.
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phoneAnswer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
book entries, if available.
Currently In Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio syssay “Call”.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” call. Press the
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
operations at this point.
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the button until you hear a single beep.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Toggling Between Calls
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
To make a second call while you are currently on a call, time.
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
Three-Way Calling
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current Redial
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button to begin.
• Press the
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
one conference call.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
English, Espanol, or Francais.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
the language selection.
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duraAfter selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
voice commands will be in that language.
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonemobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
number for your area.
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
follows:
for the mobile phone directly.
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• and have network coverage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• Press the
button to begin.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
“Towing Assistance”.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems”.
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528Working With Automated Systems
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14This method is used in instances where one generally has
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
navigating through an automated telephone system.
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
Towing Assistance references.
service or automated customer service line. Some ser• If supported, this number may be programmable on
vices require immediate response selection. In some
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Uconnect™ Phone.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
press the
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Press the
button to begin.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
one of the following:
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
− “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
Phone And Network Status Indicators
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaIf available on the radio and/or on a premium display tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by that the call did not go through even though the call is in
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
notification to inform you of your phone and network audio.
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
button to begin.
• Press the
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
priority phone present in or near (approximately
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
button and
phone being announced, press the
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec- Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
button to begin.
• Press the
paired phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Select Another Mobile Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
This feature allows you to select and start using another
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
wish to delete.
• You can also press the
button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogThis procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- Reset
dures:
button.
• press the
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
radio mode):
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
the session begins, or,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training, prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Command
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a Voice Command period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
compromised with the convertible top down.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Send Messages:
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
your phone.
• Press the
button.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
If you wish to hear the new message:
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
• Press the
button.
button while the
To send a message, press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
11. See You in 15 minutes
1. Yes
12. I am on my way
2. No
13. I’ll be late
3. Where are you?
14. Are you there yet?
4. I need more direction.
15. Where are we meeting?
5. L O L
16. Can this wait?
6. Why
17. Bye for now
7. I love you
18. When can we meet
8. Call me
19. Send number to call
9. Call me later
20. Start without me
10. Thanks
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
• Press the
button.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Power-Up
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
will then be given a choice to change it.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
options, press the Voice Command
set to low.
for the beep, and say your command.
button while the
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Combutton and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
The Voice Command system understands two types of
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
menu.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Switch to system setup”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Switch to setup”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Language English”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
• “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
Setup
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
button first and wait for the beep before
following:
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new Power Seats — If Equipped
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
SEATS
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
vehicle.
and the seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of the seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
backward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING! (Continued)
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas(Continued) senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
WARNING!
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your within two to five minutes.
Vehicle” for further information.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
Front Heated Seats
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
controls for each heater are located near the bottom the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
center of the instrument panel (below the climate con- maximum of 50 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
trols).
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats indepenheating. Press the switch a second time to select
dently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
located on the rear of the center console.
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
Rear Heated Seat Switches
maximum of 50 minutes of continuous operation. At that
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls.
The ventilated seat switches are used
to control the speed of the fans located
in the seat. Press the switch once to
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the
switch will be illuminated. When LOW speed is selected
one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
Press the power folding switch located
on the instrument panel to fold the
head restraints.
NOTE:
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to • The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the power folding switch. The head restraints
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Startmust be raised manually when occupying the third
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
row.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row • Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
head restraints can be folded using a switch, located on
the instrument panels switch bank.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Tumble Strap
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Tumbled Second Row
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
3
Third Row Folded
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full
upright position, or tumbled when folding the third row
seats.
Release Handles
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable steering wheel posiDriver Memory Buttons
tion (if equipped), and the radio station preset settings.
Your
vehicle
is
equipped
with two RKE transmitters. One
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also
or
both
RKE
transmitters
can be linked to either memory
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
position.
The
memory
system
can accommodate up to
UNLOCK button is pressed.
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
two memory positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings and remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to driver’s door.
the ON/RUN position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
transmitters.
Step 3.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
the ON/RUN position.
mirror to the desired positions.
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
4. Adjust the power steering column tilt and telescoping
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙. Refer
position (if equipped) to the desired positions.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
memory position 2.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
Memory Position Recall
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory one second will occur before another recall can be
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not selected.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
remove the key.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to 2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
memory position 1.
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
on the driver’s door.
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
vehicle.
button 1 on the driver’s door.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
available:
button on the RKE transmitter.
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
transmitter.
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
• The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward To open the hood, two latches must be released.
the ACC/ON position.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis- panel and in front of the driver’s door.
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
LIGHTS
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
Headlight Switch
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
light and instrument panel lights are also
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headturned
on.
To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
switch
back
to the O (Off) position.
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, also has this customer-programmable feature. When
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
lenses.
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, further information.
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is System” and it is activated, the headlights will automatialso on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
CAUTION!
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the To Activate
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Elecdim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customerthis section for further information.
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your InstruSmartBeam™ — If Equipped
ment Panel” for further information.
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
lighting at night by automating high beam control
position.
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to
To Deactivate
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
dealer.
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp
will illuminate. The headlight switch must be used for
reactivate the system.
normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause Headlight Delay
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
system to function improperly.
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
parking brake is engaged. Also, if a turn signal is (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Underwill turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odomthe headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
high beam is selected.
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
Interior Lights
headlights are required during the day.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
Dimmer Control
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
Front Map/Reading Lights
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overafter the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
head console.
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
3
Ambient Light
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Multifunction Lever
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
3
Multifunction Lever
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
3
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the cycles, then turn off.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
shield.
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
to activate this feature.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understandtive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
OFF position when not using the system.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
fully engaged.
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUWARNING!
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is Adjusting the steering column while driving or drivmoved out of the NEUTRAL position.
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
steering column is locked before driving your veThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or serious injury or death.
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
steering column.
— IF EQUIPPED
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
steering column lever is located below the multifunction NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
lever on the steering column.
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
WARNING!
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the steering wheel heater to
overheat.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
vehicle set speed.
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
To Activate
operate at the selected speed.
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed and on level ground before pressing the SET
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be button.
turned off when not in use.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
WARNING!
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
You could lose control and have an accident. Always speed memory.
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
To Accelerate For Passing
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
increase until the button is released, then the new set
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
speed will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
moderate hills is normal.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
Control.
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
WARNING!
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your verecommendations.
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
3
ParkSense威 Warning Display
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System OFF
Park Assist System ON
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Arcs
Park Assist
System ON
None
Radio Mute
No
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the ParkSense威 switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when Park- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
Sense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 switch the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition.
LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
If the message continues to appear see an authorized
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
dealer.
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damthe shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
age the sensors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, • Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operatnot to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ing properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furtherbumper.
more, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
key.
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
the EVIC.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key and pressing the
“save” soft-key.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
Opener (HomeLink威), power liftgate and power sunroof the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
switches may also be included, if equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secuprogramming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
rity Alarm is active.
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indithe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frerelease the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
to rapid.
steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programbefore 1995.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
ing steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigtrained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
pressed.
follow all remaining steps.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
Using HomeLink姞
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
To operate, press and release the programmed
NOT erase the channels.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
erased.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
Pinch Protect Feature
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obClosing Sunroof — Express
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucsecond and the sunroof will close automatically from any tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurpressed.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Venting Sunroof — Express
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Sunroof Maintenance
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
Sunshade Operation
the glass panel.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Ignition OFF Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
open.
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
Wind Buffeting
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of door will cancel this feature.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Sunroof Fully Closed
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
element must be used.
sunroof is fully closed.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
need to be replaced.
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im- In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
3
Center Console Outlet
Front Power Outlet
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Rear Power Outlet
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,
there will be a delay of approximately one second before
the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholder Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Door Panel Storage
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove box door.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console
The center console contains both an upper and a lower
storage area.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
Press And Release
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
Three-Press Switch
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
first detent for intermittent operation and to the OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release
of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear
wiper operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF
position, rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle two
times before returning to the parked position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if window defroster only when the engine is operating.
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
3
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
Thumb Screw
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
3
Bending Pivot
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the deployment of the crossbars.
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Deployed Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Stowing the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
3
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Crossbar to Side Rail
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Stowing Crossbars
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
3
Tightening Crossbar
Stowed Crossbars
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the NOTE:
opposite side.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumbwheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 280
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 269
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go
Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . 285
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
䡵 Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 298
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 306
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 307
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 317
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 317
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 322
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 323
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . 336
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Play A DVD Using The
Touch-Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Replacing The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Replacing The Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 365
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Rear Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 372
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Off Switch
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Headlight Switch
12 — Hood Release
13 — Fuel Door Release
14 — Dimmer Control
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
1. Tachometer
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
(RPM x 1000).
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
tires.)
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
WARNING!
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system. If this light remains on after several ignition 5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
trol (ESC) is off.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
6. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
ON/RUN.
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds is not functioning and that service is required. However,
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop the conventional brake system will continue to operate
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
that caused the ESC activation.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the 10. High Beam Indicator
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerthe light inspected by an authorized dealer.
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog 11. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
Telltale Area
lights are on.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red tell8. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
tales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle
This indicator will illuminate when the park
Information Center (EVIC)”.
lights or headlights are turned on.
12. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display/Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve9. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals hicle has been driven.
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
chime, and an EVIC message will appear if the turn
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
14. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display For further information on four-wheel drive operation
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
ter”.
15. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
13. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
Telltale Area
4WD Lock switch is activated and the transThis area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic
position (Off-Road Mode).
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
16. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
17. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the Amber Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
caution telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
18. Fuel Gauge
21. Vehicle Security Light
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
19. Air Bag Warning Light
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first light will also come on for about three seconds when the
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is ignition is first turned on.
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
22. Brake Warning Light
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authoThis light monitors various brake functions,
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
including brake fluid level and parking brake
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
application. If the brake light turns on it may
Vehicle” for further information.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 23. TOW/HAUL
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
center stack upper switch bank. This light will
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
24. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apto eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
The EVIC consists of the following:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
ACC (if equipped), Vehicle Speed, Trip Info,
Tire PSI, Vehicle Info, Messages, Units, System
Setup, Turn Menu Off) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
BACK Button
• Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go,
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
Passive Entry - if equipped)
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Service Park Assist System
• Park Assist System Blinded
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Keyfob Battery Low
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Left front turn signal lamp out
the following messages:
• Right front turn signal lamp out
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
• Key Left Vehicle
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Key Not Detected
• Service air filter
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Low Tire Pressure
• Premium TPM System Graphic Display
• Perform service
• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor• ESC System Off
ing System” in “Starting And Operating”)
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service blind spot system
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Blind spot system off
• Blind spot detection unavailable sensor blocked
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise ConThe Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to • Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adap- • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under- • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control • ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
Vehicle” (if equipped).
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
distance, this message will flash and a chime will • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeto “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanddiately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Cruise Off When Park Brake is On
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Cancelled Below Min. Speed
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting • Coolant low
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
• Oil change due > Dealer Info
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
• Key in ignition
equipped).
• Lights on
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Remote start active — Insert Key and Turn to Run
• Ignition or Accessory On Lights On
• Memory 1 profile set
• Oil temp high Speed may be limited
• Memory 2 profile set
• Oil temp high Speed limited
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• Turn signal on
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Park assist on
• Memory 1 profile recall
• Warning object detected
• Memory 2 profile recall
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Wrong Key
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Damaged Key
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Key not programmed
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Park Assist Disabled
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Automatic high beams on
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
• Automatic high beams off
• Service All Wheel Drive System
• All Wheel Drive System in neutral
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Shift Lever Status
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
Owners Manual
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
AWD AUTO
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
LOW RANGE
• Electronic Speed Control ON
SERV AWD
This light will turn on when the electronic
For AWD Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
speed control is ON. For further information,
in N Press 4 Low
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
For AWD High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
•
•
•
•
•
•
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Speed Control SET
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
This light will turn on when the electronic
This light warns the driver of a potential collispeed control is SET. For further information,
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underdriver to take action in order to avoid the
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
collision. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive • Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steerThis light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
ing maneuvers may have occurred, which
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
caused an over temperature condition in the power
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor- This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
mation.
• Low Fuel Light
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
fuel is added.
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
• Loose Gascap Indicator
and during parking maneuvers.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
service.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the windThis light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
shield washer fluid is low.
may be ajar.
• SERV AWD
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
The SERV AWD light monitors the electric shift AWD
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
system. If the SERV AWD light stays on or comes on
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
during driving, it means that the AWD system is not shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
functioning properly and that service is required.
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
telltales include:
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Door Ajar
• Charging System Light
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
This light shows the status of the electrical chargmore doors may be ajar.
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the • Engine Temperature Warning Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight will come on when the ignition is first
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
to cool.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans- If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
mission fluid temperature that might occur illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive components and cause a fire.
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the Oil Change Due
light goes off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do
not start the engine.)
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
following Fuel Economy Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
• Distance To Empty
Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. To reset the average fuel economy display,
press and release the SELECT button once while average
fuel economy is highlighted. Once reset, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Fuel Saver Mode — On
The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
Vehicle Speed
This feature allows you to monitor your vehicle speed on
the EVIC display, press and release the SELECT button to
change the units of measure between in MPH or km/h.
Trip Info
This feature allows you to track the total distance traveled since the last reset and the elapsed time of travel.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
• Trip A
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
• Trip B
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue • Elapsed Time
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the functions, press and hold the SELECT button for two
Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode dis- seconds. Current display will reset along with other
functions.
plays the following information:
Trip A
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
reset.
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
Trip B
available information displays, then press SELECT to
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
display any one of the following choices.
reset.
• Coolant Temp
Elapsed Time
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed • Oil Temperature
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON Displays the actual oil temperature.
or START position.
• Oil Pressure
To Reset The Display
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the
• Trans Temperature
resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
always re-appears.
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaKeyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner of the
Automatic Compass Calibration
EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat- need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
ing” for more information.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
Compass Variance Map
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, map. For further information, refer to “Compass Variance.”
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance” 1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
EVIC.
then press the SELECT button.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
displayed in the EVIC.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator EVIC.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
NOTE: For the most accurate compass performance, the indicator turns off. The compass will now function
compass variance must be set before performing the normally.
manual compass calibration. The variance should be set
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in three
seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaPress and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
displays in the EVIC.
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
following choices.
deactivated.
Select Language
Auto Unlock Doors
When in this display you may select one of five lanWhen this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
feature showing the system has been activated, or the all doors will unlock no matter which passive entry
check-mark is removed showing the system has been equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press
is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
deactivated.
the driver’s door is grasped. With passive entry, if Driver
Remote Unlock Sequence
Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
than once will only result in the driver’s door opening.
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
You have to touch a passenger passive entry equipped
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
door handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver’s
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of RKE Linked To Memory
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high- profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the (if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
setting has been selected.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with passive entry and
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press,
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark apRemote Start Comfort Sys.
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
system has been deactivated.
seat features will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are Horn With Remote Start
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
These features will stay on through the duration of occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the feature showing the system has been activated or the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
showing the system has been deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers
(Available with Automatic Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
(Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Display ECO Symbol — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected.
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go ” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gauge Glow Rings
The gauge glow rings that illuminate the tachometer and
speedometer in the instrument cluster can be turned on
or off. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Auto High Beams
(Available With SmartBeam™ Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Intermittent Wiper — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper
operation.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert. By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once,
the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind
Spot: Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By
pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time
“Blind Spot: Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
system has been deactivated.
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Conalignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
in the BSM not operating to specification.
mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is
selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
Forward Collision Warning
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Display Units Of Measure In:
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped) System Status
can be changed between English and Metric units of
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
• System OK
Liftgate Chime
When this feature is selected the chime will sound when • System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
the liftgate is in operation, signaling that the liftgate is in
active System Warnings)
operation. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres- NOTE:
sure of all four road tires). For additional information, • Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
And Operating”.
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Tire Pressure Display
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 130 (RES)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second and radio frequency.
time to turn off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the SCROLL control knob.
volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
SEEK Button
button works in a similar manner.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
AM/FM Button
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
CD and MP3 modes.
change of pace.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranplaying time display to a small CD playing time display. domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right ACC position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
screen.
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature TIME Button
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further and radio frequency.
details.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Music Type information.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
treble tones.
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
No program type or
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
None
undefined
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Classical
Classicl
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
College
College
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Country
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Foreign Language
Language
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
NOTE:
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
AM/FM Button
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefollowing table are supported. In addition, variable bit
character extension)
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
character extension)
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3 File Formats
Layer 3
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
supported by the radios.
not play the file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback of MP3 Files
before writing to the disc.
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
time to start playing the MP3 files.
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
by the following:
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
CD-R media
playable files).
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer The folder list will time out after five seconds.
to load than non-multisession discs
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
increase with more files and folders
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
ignition is OFF).
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
Equipped
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastMP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
vehicle speakers.
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio limited coverage in Alaska.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Number (ESN/SID)
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Please have the following information available when
mode.
calling:
Satellite Antenna
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
Number (ESN/SID).
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Reception Quality
ACC position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
following items:
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butOperating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
Equipped
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
iPod威 or external USB device support capability.
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate • Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
feature to control the connected device.
an option with these radios.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio Play Mode
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
audio device)
USB device and display data:
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
Using Radio Buttons
previous track.
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
seconds.
each track in the current list and then forward to the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previTrack⬙.
ous and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the ⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
Next Track
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
Streaming Audio”.
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
Play Mode
music on your cellular phone.
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
Previous Track
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
previous track music on your cellular phone.
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
and played.
current song that is playing will display info.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console : Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button in the
center of the overhead console behind the screen.
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Control knob.
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the VES™ player, the screen turns on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Overhead Video Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Or
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
4
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by when turned off.
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by reUsing The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
on the Remote Control.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES 3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear the top left of the screen.
VES Controls screen.
Rear VES Soft-key
Select Channel/Screen 1 And DISC
In The MEDIA Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
NOTE:
Play Video Games
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC input jacks located on the back of the center console.
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
4
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
on the Remote Control.
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
4
Rear VES Soft-key
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch AUX 1 in the VES
column. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the top of
the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
button on the remote until the desired audio source
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
appears on the screen.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
4
Rear VES Soft-key
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD
In The MEDIA Column
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
simultaneously.
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
and right side equates to Channel 2.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
playing the first track.
Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source
(DVD) will not show the video on the screen.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
is on Channel 1.
will display on the screen and the audio could be
Using The Remote Control
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even 1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
when the Video Screen is closed
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly
pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
4
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
• The VES™ will retain the last setting when turned off.
Rear VES Soft-key
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in NOTE:
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at the • To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
top left of the screen.
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
DISC In The MEDIA Column
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button
is illuminated momentarily.
Remote Control
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five
seconds.
Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of screen Channel 1
(right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality of screen Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear through the current audio track or video chapter. In
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data
disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG
Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a
disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previdisc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from the
ous disc.
Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM
for a CD).
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
9. 䡲 (Stop) – Stops disc play
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected 17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
for details on changing modes.
rewind through the current audio track or video chapter.
In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display 18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
settings section) or the DVD Setup menu. When a disc is menu.
loaded in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
mode is selected and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
Setup Menu of this manual.)
navigate in the menu.
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
The Remote Control Storage
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
Replacing The Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
• To disable the Remote Control from making any • Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to
according to the polarity diagram shown.
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s)
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
indicate when Video Lock is active.
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition Headphones Operation
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
operation of the VES™.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status on
a popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector 4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate
switch..
to the available modes and press the ENTER button to
NOTE:
select the new mode.
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
Replacing The Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for as long as you own the Product.
operation. To replace the batteries:
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover use is defective in workmanship or materials.
downward.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
according to the polarity diagram shown.
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTthe initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEparticular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire- FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer- FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
able.
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
The VES™ and radio are capable of communicating with
each other. This allows the VES™ to output radio audio
to the headphones and the radio to output VES™ audio
to the vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ are in
the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be visible on
the radio’s display and the shared icon will be visible on
the VES™ screen. When in shared mode, the same audio
source is heard in the headphones and vehicle speakers
simultaneously.
What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
If you have any questions or comments regarding your mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com. mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™ radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
Information Mode Display
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
long as it is not in shared mode.
When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES™
have control of the video functions. The VES™ has the
ability to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
Information Mode Video Screen Display
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the 1. Channel 1 Mode
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
Numeric Keypad Menu
4. Channel 2 Mode
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
4
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Numeric Keypad Menu
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 Station List Menu
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
Channel Selection Menu For SIRIUS Backseat TV™
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and When listening to Satellite audio or watching SIRIUS
Backseat TV™ (if equipped), pressing the remote conpress the remote control’s ENTER button.
trol’s MENU button displays a list of all available chan4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go nels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s navigabutton and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station, press the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
Disc Menu
play.
Display Settings
4
Disc Menu For CDs
Video Screen Display Settings
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode
To change the settings, press the remote control’s naviSelect menu.
gation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
display menu or media.
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
button.
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If DVD Region Codes
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
are installed in the headphones.
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
Disc Formats
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow- disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see DVD Audio Support
notes about DVD Region Codes)
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
format files
you increase the volume level to account for this change
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recorded Discs
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
recording software publisher for more information about
help avoid playback problems, use the following guideburning playable discs.
lines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
closed are playable.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so DVD player.
each track number is unique.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
player will automatically skip the file and begin playAudio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
ing the next available file.
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
supported. For both formats, the recommended
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
these extensions for any other types of files.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downprevious file.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
• To change the current directory, use the remote conThe DVD player will automatically skip the file and
trol’s PROG Up and Down buttons.
begin playing the next available file.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
Display
Other Language Setup
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player will
display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player.
DVD Player Language Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting • When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Engremote control’s ENTER button. If the language code
lish. These languages are selected using a special fouris not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙*⬙. If the
digit code.
digits are visible after this step, then the language code
is valid.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu and follow these additional instructions:
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butvehicle was purchased.
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
Language
Code
Language
Code
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
Dutch
2311
French
1517
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
German
1304
Italian
1819
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Portuguese 2519
Spanish
1418
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
Rating and Password Setup
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After The Rating and Password settings work together to
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
selection sequence for all four digits.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the
follow these additional instructions:
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
4
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
DVD Player Level Menu
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
Product Agreement
buttons, select the Rating tab.
This product incorporates copyright protection technol• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited.
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
digits.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the ⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
4
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
after the current track begins to play.
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
too high.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
into manual mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
2. Recirculation Control Button
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
Press and release to change the current setting, the blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
indicator illuminates when ON.
selected.
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
This display shows the temperature setting for the left Provides the passenger with independent temperature
front seat occupant.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
4. Mode Display
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
5. Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection. 10. Auto Temperature Control Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
front seat occupant.
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
7. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the modes.
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
12. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF
16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
17. Rear Control Button
Provides the rear seat occupants with independent
blower and temperature control. Push the button to
activate the rear climate control and allow the rear seat
occupants control of the rear blower and temperature
settings.
13. Mode Control Button
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiLevel, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the Automatic Operation
ATC to switch into manual mode.
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
14. SYNC Button
Press and release to control the temperature setting for
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
both zones from the driver temperature control.
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience This system offers a full complement of manual override
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to features.
function automatically.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for temperature control will continue to operate automaticold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts cally.
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
comfort as quickly as possible.
Use the outer dial control to regulate
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
the amount of air forced through the
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system in any mode you select. The
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
blower speed increases as you move
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
the control clockwise and decreases
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
Blower Control when you move the control counterclockwise.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
by selecting one of the following positions.
air is directed through the defrost and side window
Panel Mode
demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the while keeping the windshield clear.
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
Bi-Level Mode
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
temperature settings for best windshield and side win- NOTE:
dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the • If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
the blower is controlled manually.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
Recirculation Control
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
Air Conditioning (A/C)
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
pressing the Recirculation control button. Resystem. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool circulation mode should only be used temporarily. The
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
deactivate the A/C system.
vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode is not allowed in the Defrost modes to improve
window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The unit provides warm or cool air through the
floor and upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
If the rear system is off, changing the rear setting to a
1 – Rear Blower
3 – Rear Temperature
position other than off will turn the rear system on. If 2 – Rear Climate Control Icon
both the front and rear systems are off, turning the rear
system on from the rear controls will also turn on the Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
front system on.
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the Rear Temperature Control
second row seat occupants have control of the rear Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the
second row seat occupants have control of the rear mode
blower speed.
control knob.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
Floor Mode
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Air comes from the floor outlets.
DEFROST mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
Window Fogging
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
Operating Tips
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Summer Operation
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
obstructions.
overheating during the high load condition.
Vacation Storage
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condia heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 390
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 All-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/
Precautions (3.6L Engine) – If Equipped . . . . 408
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ When To Use Low Range – If Equipped . . . . 415
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . 422
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 427
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 428
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 448
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ ESC Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC
Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 449
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 469
䡵 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 457
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . .
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 472
. . . . 472
. . . . 474
. . . . 474
. . . . 475
. . . . 475
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 479
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 488
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
▫ Recreational Towing – Rear-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive
Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . 498
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive
Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . 499
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operUsing Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
ate the ignition switch with the push
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
START/STOP button is installed and
accelerator pedal.
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go).
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
accelerator pedal.
position.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
Removing The Button
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
button loose.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Position)
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the and START. To change the ignition switch positions
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP follow these steps.
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
PARK position, or it could roll.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
WARNING!
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater cord to
a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK
position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must
be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission (3.6L Engine)
— If Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select
Shift Lever
(ERS)” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or
right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select the Gear Ranges
highest available transmission gear, and will display that DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
gear in the instrument cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released), after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
remove the key fob. Once the key fob is removed, the
shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transThe following indicators should be used to ensure that mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
WARNING!
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
second and first gear normally.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE or personal injury.
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
1
2
3
4
D
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift Screen Display
1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
lever to the left (-) will downshift the transmission, Actual Gear(s)
activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the Allowed
instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top available shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
gear.
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L Engine)
— If Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or
right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Shift Lever
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Ranges
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released), after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
remove the key fob. Once the key fob is removed, the
shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started DRIVE
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the trans- This range should be used for most city and highway
mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
WARNING!
automatically upshifts through underdrive first and secDo not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ond gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and
fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum drivignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
To access all six available gears, you must use the If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “TransElectronic Range Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
Range Select (ERS)” in this section).
the transmission cools down.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
performance and extend transmission life by reducing gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
excess heat generation.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the be modified depending on engine and transmission
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imdone to prevent transmission damage due to overheat- proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
ing.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
service is required.
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
available gear.
second and first gear normally.
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
additional underdrive gear which is not normally used
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear
can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability
WARNING!
when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,
gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears ) are the same as the slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
normal fourth and fifth gears.
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
5
6
D
1,2, 1,2, 1,2, 1-5
4 4,5 4-6
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator, and
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down. heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/
Overdrive Operation
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
The automatic transmission includes an electronically the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The trans- to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transthe following conditions are present:
mission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
• the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature,
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of
driving]. Because top gear is disabled, and engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the trans- ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
mission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. to wheels with traction.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
(3.6L Engine) – If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time allwheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) – If
Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
center console.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
AWD Control Switch (Three–Position)
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shiftmode positions:
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
components.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the EVIC
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center) and indicate the
current and desired transfer case selection. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When you select a different transfer case position,
the position indicator lights will do the following:
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
transfer case completes the shift.
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
The “SERV AWD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning prop- tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
erly and that service is required.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional information on the appropriate use of each towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
transfer case mode position, see the information below: Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
AWD AUTO
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power to Shifting Procedure
the rear wheels. The all–wheel drive system will be
NOTE:
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
LOW RANGE
position will remain ON, and the newly selected
All-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
position indicator light will continue to flash until all
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drivethe requirements for the selected position have been
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
met. To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
original position, make certain all shift requirements
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
again.
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. 3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light the desired position.
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
ON.
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
AWD AUTO⇔LOW RANGE
Alternate Procedure
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
NEUTRAL.
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
Preferred Procedure
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
NOTE: If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process, the desired position indicator light will flash
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
continuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL shift is
complete.
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When To Use LOW Range – If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a traction. This range should be limited to extreme situanarrower track to make them capable of performing in a tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
LOW range.
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
Driving through water more than a few inches/
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to Maintenance
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contamito minimize wave effects.
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
Flowing Water
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to preIf the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
vent component damage.
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
drive straight up or down.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
required.
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and susspeed and direction.
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis- • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
sion whenever possible.
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
After Driving Off-Road
propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or POWER STEERING
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
3.6L Engine
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
and cleaned as soon as possible.
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
WARNING!
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause while parking and good feel while driving. If the electroexcessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
not have full braking power when you need it to prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your system will provide mechanical steering capability.
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
CAUTION!
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE:
message and a flashing icon are displayed on • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
and during parking maneuvers.
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
formation.
service.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” mes5.7L Engine
sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
The standard power steering system will give you good
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
steering capability if power assist is lost.
assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condiuntil the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
Power Steering Fluid Check
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
WARNING!
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
Continued operation with reduced power steering apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoassist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
rized dealer.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
WARNING!
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
CAUTION!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
disengage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
Parking Brake
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the
TCS is active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure The ESC system has two available operating modes in
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road AWD AUTO range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and
conditions.
one operating mode in AWD LOW range.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss
of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
AUTO Range (All-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD
AUTO range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever
the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
AWD AUTO range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
ESC OFF Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen- Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
while the vehicle is in motion.
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
WARNING!
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
When in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle
will become active automatically once an excessively
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
AWD Low Range (LOW)
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range, may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
(Continued)
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the slow or fast mode, it does
not function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
the driver should not notice it.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
ESC Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF
Indicator Light
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is
active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC
OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
[295 kg]).
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
outside temperature condition.
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
Wheel – If Equipped
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
75 mph (120 km/h).
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
pattern.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipthe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempodriver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
80D18 103M.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equiptire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
• Due to limited clearance, use SAE class “S” low profile
cables or traction devices only. Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 #SZ 441 cables or equivalent are
recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
SNOW TIRES
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
checked before using these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
safety and handling of your vehicle.
unequal rates.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
recommended cold tire pressure.
shown in the following diagram.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
(Continued)
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
the tire.
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
Base System
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate, a warning mesreadings to the Receiver Module.
sage to appear, or the chime to sound.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish,
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur by any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM
NOTE:
SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a minimum of
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
five seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be ON, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and a chime to sound. Driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” as long as none of the road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire, in place of a road tire, that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed
for a minimum of five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
readings to the Receiver Module.
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly tires.
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
the proper pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an auThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of
following components:
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
• Receiver Module
EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE MESSAGE” message for
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
a minimum of five seconds, and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
tion.
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
The system will automatically update, the graphic disin PSI, kPa, or BAR.
play of the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as none of
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
road tires are below the low pressure warning threshpressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
old.
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
to be ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
SURE” message to appear in the EVIC, and the
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
value “flashing.” Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minSYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold driveability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
(Continued) NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
(Continued)
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
5
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
15% unleaded gasoline.
than 1/4 full
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with • When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
following start up even if the above recommendations
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
are followed.
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
5
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
Fuel Filler Cap
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
Release Cable
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
this will pop up the outboard edge.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
disengage snaps.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
4. Remove the storage bin.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
5. Pull the release cable.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry, including
the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
bottom of the label is your VIN.
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerThis is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exlisted.
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
Inflation Pressure
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
Curb Weight
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before review this information to tow your load as efficiently
driving.
and safely as possible.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way and recommendations in this manual concerning vethe brakes operate.
hicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
WARNING!
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaIf the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing information.
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
WARNING!
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
Weight-Distributing Hitch
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
Trailer Sway Control
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fricWhen used in accordance with the manufacturers’ direction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crossindividual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to winds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
trailer stability. A friction/hydraulic sway control mechanism and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights
(TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and
Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross axle
weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of
Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized
dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Model
Model
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
3.6L
RWD
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
3.6L
AWD
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
5.7L
RWD
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
5.7L
AWD
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg) 60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The addition of passengers
and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo
(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs
(1 769 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or more,
it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle.
NOTE: Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow
package are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels, or heavier in the
rear, can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Consider the following items when computing the
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
many trailer collisions.
• The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres− An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
brake controller is not required.
inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg), and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package includes both a seven-pin and a
four-pin connector at the rear of the vehicle.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if
you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range,
should be selected.
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
(5.7L engine).
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
selecting a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range
you can get back to cruising speed.
Select (ERS) feature) while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions, will improve performance
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shiftmaximize fuel efficiency.
ing and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
SNOW PLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
heating, take the following actions:
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
− City Driving
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the transedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
Recreational Towing – Rear-Wheel Drive Models
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
will result.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Shift the transmission
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
into PARK.
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to
the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The transmission must be placed in the PARK
position for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission into PARK.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, remove the
Keyless Enter-N-Go button and use the key fob to
complete this procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures/
Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds,
until the light behind the N symbol starts to blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
8. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
9. Start the engine.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
12. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE.
13. Turn OFF the engine.
14. Firmly apply the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into PARK.
NEUTRAL Switch
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N), ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into
PARK.
16. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
17. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
18. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) indicator light indicates that
shift requirements have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL Switch
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, 7. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE:
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid • Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
gear clash.
button and must continue to be met until the shift has
9. Shift transmission into PARK.
been completed. If any of these requirements are not
met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, or are
10. Release the brake pedal.
no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N)
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is
12. Start the engine.
released.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
14. Release the parking brake.
for a transfer case shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
not take place and no position indicator lights will be
16. The Keyless Enter-N-Go button (if equipped) may
on or flashing.
now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting
Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting and Oper- • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
ating” for further information.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 528
6
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
▫ Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob . . . . . 532
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
6
508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
6
Jack Storage Location
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rotate the thumb screw on the jack to loosen the assem- the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
bly and remove the jack from the bracket.
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
Thumb Screw Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
Spare Tire Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the winch
stops.
6
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear bumper.
Tab Location
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push it
Spare Tire
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513
6
Sleeve And Cable
Releasing Protective Plate
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the Preparations For Jacking
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, away from
traffic.
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Place the transmission in PARK, set the parking brake
and activate the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen the lug nuts on the road wheel one turn, but do
not remove.
6
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Assemble the cover on top of the jack and attach the 3. For the front axle, place the jack and protective cap on
lug wrench to the jack tool with the hook.
the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
Jack And Tool Assembly
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
6
Front Jacking Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack and protective cap on the
flange rearward of the hoist/rear tie-down bracket, just
forward of the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
Mounting Spare Tire
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
tightness is 110 ft lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
6
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Remove the small center cap and position the alumi- 11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
num road wheel behind rear bumper with the “beauty plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end of
side” facing rearward.
the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped cone
shape wheel plate though the road wheel and protective
plate.
“Beauty Side”
Installing Winch
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec- NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and between the underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
the rear bumper and exhaust system heat shields. Raise may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
the tire by turn the lug wrench on the winch extension
WARNING!
clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three times to make sure
the cable is tight.
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the flap
on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools in the
bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro straps to
secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug wrench on the
forward side of the jack. Expand the jack on the bracket
by turning the thumb screw clockwise until it is tight to
prevent rattles.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
6
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack in
the rear storage bin.
Jack And Tool Kit Properly Stored
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack
and tool kit.
Jack And Tool Kit
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 110 ft/lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
6
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Preparations For Jump-Start
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
precautions.
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
the discharged battery.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
vehicle.
rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posiplying slight pressure to the accelerator. In general, the
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing
you should have the battery and charging system in- the engine is most effective.
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. If the engine is running, press the START/STOP
button to turn it off. Do not start the engine (engine OFF).
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
6
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully remove 6. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, reach into the
the shift lever override access cover, located on the opening and press and hold the shift lever override
down.
bottom of the cupholder.
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
rubber liner.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• Transmission in PARK
• 30 mph (48 km/h)max speed
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
6
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged refer to “Shift Lever Rear-Wheel Drive Models
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc- The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
PARK position for towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
CAUTION!
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUDo not attempt to use sling type equipment when TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
do not attach to front or rear suspension components.
CAUTION!
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damSpecial care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
Warranty.
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed
instructions.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 539
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 539
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 582
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 574
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . 585
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 588
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
soon as possible.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
PROGRAMS
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
been certified by the American
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
manufacturer only recommends
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.
ber, should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating Synthetic Engine Oils
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
quality requirements are met, and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high-quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Air Cleaner Filter
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, ser- maintenance intervals.
vice station, or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every oil change.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt condition should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt
or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
blade holder.
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze),
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5–Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
Adding Coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentraYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(-37°C) are anticipated.
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
period, it is important that you use the same engine
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove
the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals and children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap, unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
freezing.
mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle Brake System
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be periodically inspected.
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
maintenance intervals.
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
(Continued) The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill Transfer Case
hole.
Fluid Level Check
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
cast iron housings.
position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Adding Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perforDrain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be mainCAUTION!
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will require
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
Regular fluid level checks are not required. For this
reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or
Special Additives
malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission fluid level.
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the fluid level properly, the following procedure
must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
CAUTION!
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat- Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
ing temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. If the
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do produce an accurate reading.
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to 7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
fluid level.
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem- dipstick tube.
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geonormal operating temperature.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on Washing
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vecorrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to
The most common causes are:
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
clear and open.
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Special Care
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manchrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
ner:
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
upholstery and carpeting.
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiInterior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
WARNING!
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
clean vinyl upholstery.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomCleaning Headlights
mended for leather upholstery.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Plastic is not as scratch-resistant as glass and therefore
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Glass Surfaces
rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Seat Belt Maintenance
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
directly on the mirror.
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
Totally Integrated Power Module
Cavity
J01
J02
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Air Suspension
Power Liftgate
Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Cavity
J03
J04
J05
J06
J07
J08
J09
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Trailer Tow
J10
Driver Door Node
J11
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Seat
J12
E-Brake
J13
J14
J15
J17
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Headlamp Wash
Relay Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow Lamps/
Park Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
Starter Motor Solenoid
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
Mini
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Cavity
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module
Transmission Range
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan
Motor Low
Front Wiper
M2
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
M7
Stop Lamp
M9
M3
M5
M6
M8
M10
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Electronic Limit Slip
Differential/Air Suspension
Liftgate Unlock/DRL
Relay
115V AC Power
Inverter
Rain Sensor/Cigar
Lighter
Power Outlet #2
(Switchable)
Front Heated Seat &
Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
Video/Universal Garage Door Opener
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Cavity
M11
M12
M13
M14
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Heating, Ventilation
& Air Conditioning
(Climate Control
System)
Radio/Amplifier
Cavity
M15
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera
M16
M18
M19
M20
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Power Seat
Module(s)/Adaptive
Cruise Control/
Audio Telematics/
Daytime Running
Lights Relay/Air
Suspension Module/
Instrument Cluster
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Stop Lamp
Automatic Shutdown
1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
Automatic Shutdown
3
Horns (Low/High) –
Right
Horns (Low/High) –
Left
Rear Wiper
M28
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export Only)
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless
Entry Module
M31
M29
M30
M32
M33
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission
Controller
Tire Pressure
Monitor
J1962 Diag Connector
Backup Lamps
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission
Controller
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Cavity
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Park Assist Module/
Climate Control
System Module/IR
Sensor/Compass
Module
LH Rear Parklamps
Power Outlet
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module/
Stoplamp Switch
Sensor
All Door
Lock &Unlock
CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
• Remove fuse #J13 in the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) labeled Main Ignition Off Draw (IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . Service at Authorized Dealer (**)
Headlamp (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H11
Headlamp (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7444NA
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Liftgate Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . LED (*)
* CHMSL is not serviceable. It is a LED lamp. To replace
the LED, the entire CHMSL assembly must be replaced.
** The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can maintain in the circuit even with
the headlamp switch off and the key fob removed.
Because of this, you should not attempt to service a
headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
Front Turn Signal
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 1. Open the hood.
10 seconds, as the system charges.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterHalogen Headlamps – If Equipped
clockwise to remove from housing.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the the front fog lamp housing.
front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in engaged in the slots of the collar.
the housing.
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
4. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
5. Remove/replace bulb(s).
6. Reinstall the socket(s)
7. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Rear License Lamp
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
2. Pull bulb from socket.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer
Tow Package
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer
Tow Package
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Front and Rear
Heat Without Trailer Tow Package
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
U.S.
Metric
24 Gallons
91 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10 Quarts
9.8 Liters
11 Quarts
10.4 Liters
11.5 Quarts
10.8 Liters
12 Quarts
11.4 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Front and Rear
Heat With Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Front and Rear
Heat Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5-Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Front and Rear
Heat With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
17 Quarts
16.2 Liters
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
LZFR5C–11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L
Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L
Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 or equivalent.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent with friction modifier additive.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-11655, such as Fuchs
EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 593
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
592 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be discomes first.
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 593 M
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
master cylinder, power steering and transmission
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in(5.7L only) and add as needed.
formation.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a At Each Oil Change
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Change the engine oil filter.
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Required Maintenance Intervals
damage.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals pages for the required maintenance intervals.
as required.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 594 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
N
T 6 Months Maintenance Service
E Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 595 M
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 596 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
N
T 30 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 597 M
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 598 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
N
T 54 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169,000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 599 M
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 600 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
N ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
E ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 601 M
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169,000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 602 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
A
N ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
C ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
E ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 603 M
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (5.7L Engine).
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 604 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
A
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 605 M
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 609
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 610
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 610
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
9
608 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 609
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
610 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 611
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
612 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 613
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
614 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 615
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
616 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
618 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 546
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,76
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,75,80,98,265
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,73,75,76
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 71,73,76
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,265
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 366
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,398,565
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566,567
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
INDEX 619
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397,405 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 228 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 95
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580,581
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 27 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,97 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,472
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
10
620 INDEX
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121,365
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,84,87,89
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,87
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,308
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 323
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
INDEX 621
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 282
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,370 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 228
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 586
. . . . . . . . . . 560
. . . . . . . . . . 560
. . . . . . . . . . 557
. . . . . . . . . . 556
. . . . . . . . . . 560
. . . . . . . . . . 559
. . . . . . . . . . 559
. . . . . . . 557,586
. . . . . . . . . . 234
. . . . . . . . . . 609
10
622 INDEX
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Engine
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537,538
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . 537,538
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 199
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,96,472
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,269
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468,586
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Emergency, In Case of
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543,586
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 540
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544,586
INDEX 623
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,263,582,584
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472,474
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 565,566,567
Filters
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 77
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,96,472
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,553
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10
624 INDEX
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 588
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,583
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,295
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476,479
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Requirements .
Saver Mode . .
Tank Capacity .
Fuel Optimizer . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution
Fuel, Flexible . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
586
282
586
282
282
478
472
574
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 476,479,539
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
INDEX 625
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,399
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,29,151,467
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,483
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,482
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
507
581
582
572
263
183
582
111
387
Hill Descent Control
Hill Start Assist . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing .
Holder, Cup . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage
Hood Release . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
...................
...................
Door Opener) Transmitter
...................
...
...
..
...
487
234
216
180
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,16
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,82
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,259
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10
626 INDEX
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508,514
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,285,383
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,285
Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 85,87
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,182
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,75,80,98,265
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
INDEX 627
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Service Engine Soon
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 435
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,583
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 259
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,182,582,584
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581,582
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 260
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,214
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
10
628 INDEX
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,87
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541,612
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . 547
. . . . . 542
. . . . . 592
. . 260,540
. . . . . 613
. . . . . 176
. . . . . 176
. . . . . 176
. . . . . 469
. . . . . 283 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
. . . . . 107
. . . . . 107 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,73,77
. . . . . 110 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71,73,76
. . . . . 110
INDEX 629
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544,586
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545,586
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539,540
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,406
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,406
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,507
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,613
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10
630 INDEX
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 441
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 228
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,158
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,421
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . 196
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System
Rear Air Conditioning . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . .
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Park Sense System . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . .
Rear Window Defroster . . .
Rear Window Features . . . .
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
448
365
195
372
563
211
118
234
372
202
172
241
240
240
INDEX 631
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 500
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . 503
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 363
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,96
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,97
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 57
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
10
632 INDEX
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,82,89
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,158
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,265
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,308
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
INDEX 633
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,263,582,584
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,450,510
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,382
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,387
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,421
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,580
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 67
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10
634 INDEX
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,442
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 366
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 457
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 268
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 441
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,445,615
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482,530
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
INDEX 635
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronically Shifted . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
530
488
497
488
135
426
431
482
496
487
490
489
493
488
488
564
408
564
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,398,565
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 216
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 24
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263,582,584
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 323
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
10
636 INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191,552
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,227
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,480 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,580
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Upholstery Care
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12WD01-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.